3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
46 @dircategory Software development
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 version @value{VERSION}.
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 version @value{VERSION}.
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
145 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
154 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
163 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
166 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
169 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
172 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
175 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
178 @ifclear SingleFormat
181 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
183 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
185 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
186 * LD Index:: LD Index
193 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194 @cindex what is this?
197 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
198 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
202 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
208 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
210 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
211 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
212 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
214 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
215 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
220 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
221 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
225 @ifclear SingleFormat
226 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
228 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
233 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
236 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
237 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
244 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
246 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
247 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248 you have many choices to control its behavior.
254 * Options:: Command Line Options
255 * Environment:: Environment Variables
259 @section Command Line Options
267 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269 @cindex standard Unix system
270 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
271 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272 link a file @code{hello.o}:
275 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
278 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
279 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
283 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
284 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
289 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291 noted in the descriptions below.
294 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297 an option and its argument.
299 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303 message @samp{No input files}.
305 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
306 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
311 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
317 For options whose names are a single letter,
318 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320 option that requires them.
322 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
323 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
324 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
325 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
326 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
327 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
331 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
338 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
340 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341 compiler driver) like this:
344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
347 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
348 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
359 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
363 @include at-file.texi
365 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
366 @item -a @var{keyword}
367 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
373 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
380 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
381 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
385 @cindex architectures
386 @kindex -A @var{arch}
387 @item -A @var{architecture}
388 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
390 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
392 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
394 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
395 family}, for details.
397 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
398 other architecture families.
401 @ifclear SingleFormat
402 @cindex binary input format
403 @kindex -b @var{format}
404 @kindex --format=@var{format}
407 @item -b @var{input-format}
408 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
409 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
411 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
412 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
413 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
414 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
415 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
421 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423 linking object files of different formats), by including
424 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
427 The default format is taken from the environment variable
432 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
435 see @ref{Format Commands}.
439 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441 @cindex compatibility, MRI
442 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
444 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
445 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
447 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
450 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
452 Introduce MRI script files with
453 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
454 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
456 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
458 @cindex common allocation
465 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
471 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
480 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
482 @cindex entry point, from command line
483 @kindex -e @var{entry}
484 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
486 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
495 @kindex --exclude-libs
496 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
498 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
499 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504 be treated as hidden.
506 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517 regardless of this option.
519 @cindex dynamic symbol table
521 @kindex --export-dynamic
522 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
524 @itemx --export-dynamic
525 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
526 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
531 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
536 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539 linking the program itself.
541 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
542 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
543 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
545 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
549 @ifclear SingleFormat
550 @cindex big-endian objects
554 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @cindex little-endian objects
559 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
562 @kindex -f @var{name}
563 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
565 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
566 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
571 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579 machine specific performance.
581 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
584 @kindex -F @var{name}
585 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
587 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
601 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
602 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
604 @ifclear SingleFormat
605 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
606 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
607 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
608 environment variable.
610 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611 creating an ELF shared object.
613 @cindex finalization function
614 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
615 @item -fini=@var{name}
616 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619 the function to call.
623 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
625 @kindex -G @var{value}
626 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
629 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
632 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
633 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
635 @cindex runtime library name
636 @kindex -h @var{name}
637 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
639 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
640 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
647 @cindex incremental link
649 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
651 @cindex initialization function
652 @kindex -init=@var{name}
653 @item -init=@var{name}
654 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
659 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
660 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
661 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
662 @item -l @var{namespec}
663 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
667 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
668 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
670 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
671 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
679 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
686 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
687 archives multiple times.
689 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
692 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
693 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
694 behaviour of the AIX linker.
697 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
699 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
700 @item -L @var{searchdir}
701 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
702 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
704 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
707 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
708 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
712 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
717 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
718 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
719 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
722 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
727 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
728 @item -m @var{emulation}
729 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
732 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
735 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
743 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744 information about the link, including the following:
748 Where object files are mapped into memory.
750 How common symbols are allocated.
752 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
755 The values assigned to symbols.
757 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763 linker script containing:
771 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
780 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
785 @cindex read-only text
790 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
796 @cindex read/write from cmd line
800 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
801 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805 specification published by Microsoft.
810 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
815 @kindex -o @var{output}
816 @kindex --output=@var{output}
817 @cindex naming the output file
818 @item -o @var{output}
819 @itemx --output=@var{output}
820 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
821 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
824 @kindex -O @var{level}
825 @cindex generating optimized output
827 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
828 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
829 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
835 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
836 @item -plugin @var{name}
837 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
843 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849 just copy in the newest one.
852 @cindex push state governing input file handling
854 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
858 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
865 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868 something as follows:
871 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
875 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
877 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878 flags governing input file handling.
881 @kindex --emit-relocs
882 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
885 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
886 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888 in larger executables.
890 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
892 @kindex --force-dynamic
893 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894 @item --force-dynamic
895 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
899 @cindex relocatable output
901 @kindex --relocatable
904 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
905 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
906 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
909 @c ; see @option{-N}.
910 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
914 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918 with input files in other formats at all.
920 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
922 @kindex -R @var{file}
923 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924 @cindex symbol-only input
925 @item -R @var{filename}
926 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930 programs. You may use this option more than once.
932 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
933 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
934 the @option{-rpath} option.
938 @cindex strip all symbols
941 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
944 @kindex --strip-debug
945 @cindex strip debugger symbols
948 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
950 @kindex --strip-discarded
951 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
952 @item --strip-discarded
953 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
954 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
959 @cindex input files, displaying
962 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
964 @kindex -T @var{script}
965 @kindex --script=@var{script}
967 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
968 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
970 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
971 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
972 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
977 @kindex -dT @var{script}
978 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
980 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
984 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
993 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex undefined symbol
996 @item -u @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1004 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1009 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex symbols, require defined
1011 @cindex defined symbol
1012 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1021 @cindex constructors
1023 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1025 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1026 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030 @samp{-r} for the others.
1032 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033 @cindex orphan sections
1034 @cindex sections, orphan
1035 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1039 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1043 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1045 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1048 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1052 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1056 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1059 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1061 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1078 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1079 lists the supported emulations.
1082 @kindex --discard-all
1083 @cindex deleting local symbols
1085 @itemx --discard-all
1086 Delete all local symbols.
1089 @kindex --discard-locals
1090 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1092 @itemx --discard-locals
1093 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1097 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099 @cindex symbol tracing
1100 @item -y @var{symbol}
1101 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104 to prepend an underscore.
1106 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1109 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1111 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112 for Solaris compatibility.
1114 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115 @item -z @var{keyword}
1116 The recognized keywords are:
1120 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121 lookup caching possible.
1124 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1128 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1129 shared libraries are still allowed.
1132 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1135 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1140 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1141 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1142 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1143 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1144 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1148 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1149 but the primary executable.
1152 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1153 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1154 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1155 Lazy binding is the default.
1158 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1162 Allows multiple definitions.
1165 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1168 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1172 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1173 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1176 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1177 ignore any default library search paths.
1180 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1183 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1186 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1189 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1192 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1198 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1201 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1204 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1205 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1206 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1207 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1211 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1214 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1216 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1217 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1219 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1220 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1222 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1223 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1224 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1225 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1228 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1230 @item noextern-protected-data
1231 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1232 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1233 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1234 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1235 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1238 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1239 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1240 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1241 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1244 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1245 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1246 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1247 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1248 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1249 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1251 @item noreloc-overflow
1252 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1253 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1254 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1256 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1257 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1258 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1259 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1260 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1261 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1262 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1263 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1264 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1265 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1266 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1269 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1270 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1273 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1274 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1275 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1278 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1279 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1280 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1284 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1287 @cindex groups of archives
1288 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1289 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1290 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1291 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1293 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1294 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1295 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1296 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1297 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1298 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1299 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1302 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1303 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1306 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1307 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1308 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1309 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1310 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1311 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1312 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1313 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1314 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1315 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1316 restore the old behaviour.
1319 @kindex --no-as-needed
1321 @itemx --no-as-needed
1322 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1323 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1324 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1325 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1326 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1327 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1328 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1329 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1330 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1331 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1332 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1333 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1334 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1336 @kindex --add-needed
1337 @kindex --no-add-needed
1339 @itemx --no-add-needed
1340 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1341 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1342 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1343 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1345 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1346 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1347 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1351 @kindex -call_shared
1355 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1356 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1357 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1358 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1359 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1360 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1364 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1365 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1366 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1367 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1368 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1378 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1379 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1380 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1381 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1382 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1383 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1384 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1385 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1386 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1391 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1392 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1393 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1394 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1395 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1396 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1397 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1398 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1400 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1401 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1402 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1403 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1404 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1405 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1406 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1407 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1408 libraries and position independent executables.
1410 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1411 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1412 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1413 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1414 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1415 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1416 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1417 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1418 which support shared libraries.
1420 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1421 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1423 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1424 @item --dynamic-list-data
1425 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1428 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1429 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1430 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1432 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1433 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1434 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1436 @kindex --check-sections
1437 @kindex --no-check-sections
1438 @item --check-sections
1439 @itemx --no-check-sections
1440 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1441 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1442 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1443 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1444 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1445 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1446 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1447 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1450 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1451 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1452 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1453 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1454 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1455 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1456 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1457 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1458 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1459 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1460 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1461 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1463 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1464 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1465 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1466 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1467 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1468 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1469 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1472 @cindex cross reference table
1475 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1476 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1477 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1479 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1480 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1481 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1482 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1483 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1484 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1487 @cindex common allocation
1488 @kindex --no-define-common
1489 @item --no-define-common
1490 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1491 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1492 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1494 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1495 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1496 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1497 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1498 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1499 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1500 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1501 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1502 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1503 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1505 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1506 @cindex section groups
1508 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1509 @item --force-group-allocation
1510 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1511 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1512 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1513 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1514 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1515 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1517 @cindex symbols, from command line
1518 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1519 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1520 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1521 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1522 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1523 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1524 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1525 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1526 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1527 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1528 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1529 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1531 @cindex demangling, from command line
1532 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1533 @kindex --no-demangle
1534 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1535 @itemx --no-demangle
1536 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1537 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1538 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1539 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1540 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1541 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1542 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1543 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1544 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1546 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1547 @kindex -I@var{file}
1548 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1550 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1551 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1552 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1553 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1556 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1557 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1558 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1559 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1560 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1561 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1563 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1564 @item --embedded-relocs
1565 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1566 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1567 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1571 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1572 @item --fatal-warnings
1573 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1577 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578 @item --force-exe-suffix
1579 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1581 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1588 @kindex --gc-sections
1589 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1590 @cindex garbage collection
1592 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1593 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1594 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1595 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1596 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1600 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1610 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1611 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1612 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1615 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1616 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617 @cindex garbage collection
1618 @item --print-gc-sections
1619 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1627 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628 @cindex garbage collection
1629 @item --gc-keep-exported
1630 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1639 @kindex --print-output-format
1640 @cindex output format
1641 @item --print-output-format
1642 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1646 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1647 @cindex memory usage
1648 @item --print-memory-usage
1649 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1656 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1665 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1667 @kindex --target-help
1669 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1671 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1673 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1674 @option{-M} option, above.
1676 @cindex memory usage
1677 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1678 @item --no-keep-memory
1679 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1681 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1682 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1683 while linking a large executable.
1685 @kindex --no-undefined
1687 @item --no-undefined
1689 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1690 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1691 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1692 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1693 libraries being linked in.
1695 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1697 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1699 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1700 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1701 first definition will be used.
1703 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1704 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1705 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1706 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1707 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1708 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1709 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1710 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1711 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1713 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1714 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1715 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1718 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1719 libraries specified at link time are that:
1723 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1724 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1725 resolvable at load time.
1727 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1728 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1730 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1731 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1732 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1733 appropriate memset function.
1736 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1737 @item --no-undefined-version
1738 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1739 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1740 will be issued instead.
1742 @kindex --default-symver
1743 @item --default-symver
1744 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1747 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1748 @item --default-imported-symver
1749 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1752 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1753 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1754 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1755 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1756 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1757 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1758 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1759 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1762 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1763 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1764 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1765 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1767 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1768 @item --no-whole-archive
1769 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1772 @cindex output file after errors
1773 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1774 @item --noinhibit-exec
1775 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1776 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1777 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1778 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1782 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1783 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1784 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1786 @ifclear SingleFormat
1787 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1788 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1789 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1790 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1791 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1792 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1793 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1794 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1795 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1796 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1797 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1798 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1799 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1802 @kindex --out-implib
1803 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1804 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1805 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1806 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1807 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1808 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1809 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1810 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1813 @kindex --pic-executable
1815 @itemx --pic-executable
1816 @cindex position independent executables
1817 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1818 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1819 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1820 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1821 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1822 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1826 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1830 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1833 @cindex synthesizing linker
1834 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1838 An option with machine dependent effects.
1840 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1843 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1846 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1849 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1852 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1855 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1858 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1861 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1865 instructions, and combining constant values.
1867 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1870 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871 family of processors.
1875 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1879 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1882 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1883 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1885 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1887 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1893 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1896 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897 or symbols needed for relocations.
1899 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1903 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1904 @cindex runtime library search path
1905 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1906 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1907 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1908 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1909 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1910 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1912 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1913 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1916 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1917 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1918 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1924 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1925 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1926 the @option{-rpath} option.
1930 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1931 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1933 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1937 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1940 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1941 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1942 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1943 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944 appearing multiple times.
1946 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1950 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1952 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1956 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959 runtime linker would do.
1961 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1965 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1967 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1971 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1975 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1979 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1982 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1983 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1985 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1990 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1992 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1996 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997 warning and continue with the link.
2004 @cindex shared libraries
2005 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2007 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2008 undefined symbols in the link.
2010 @kindex --sort-common
2012 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2014 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2021 @kindex --sort-section=name
2022 @item --sort-section=name
2023 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024 patterns in the linker script.
2026 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027 @item --sort-section=alignment
2028 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029 patterns in the linker script.
2031 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2037 @kindex --split-by-file
2038 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2039 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2040 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041 size of 1 if not given.
2043 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2044 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2045 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2046 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2047 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2048 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2054 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2058 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059 as execution time and memory usage.
2061 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2069 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2072 @kindex --traditional-format
2073 @cindex traditional format
2074 @item --traditional-format
2075 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2077 use the traditional format instead.
2080 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2081 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2084 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2085 combine duplicate entries.
2087 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2089 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2093 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2099 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2102 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2103 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2107 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2109 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2111 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2112 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113 byte of the text segment.
2115 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2122 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2128 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131 values for @samp{method}:
2135 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2138 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2140 @item ignore-in-object-files
2141 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2144 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2152 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2155 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157 can change this to a warning.
2159 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2162 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2163 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2164 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2165 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2168 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2170 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2173 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2174 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2180 @kindex --warn-common
2181 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2184 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2185 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2186 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2188 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2189 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2191 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2195 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2199 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2204 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209 a definition of the same variable.
2212 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2220 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221 definition for the symbol.
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2229 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2235 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2239 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2247 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2249 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2255 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257 encountered in a different order.
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2265 @kindex --warn-constructors
2266 @item --warn-constructors
2267 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269 detect the use of global constructors.
2271 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2273 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2286 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2289 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2292 @kindex --warn-section-align
2293 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295 @item --warn-section-align
2296 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2302 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2304 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2306 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307 @item --warn-alternate-em
2308 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2310 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2316 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2321 @kindex --whole-archive
2322 @cindex including an entire archive
2323 @item --whole-archive
2324 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2325 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2326 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329 library. This option may be used more than once.
2331 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2332 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2334 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2337 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2339 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2344 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2349 Here is a trivial example:
2353 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2360 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2361 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2365 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2366 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2367 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2371 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2372 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2373 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2374 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2379 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2385 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387 @item --enable-new-dtags
2388 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2391 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2393 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2394 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2397 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2398 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2399 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2405 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2413 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2414 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2418 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2419 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2420 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2421 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2422 compressed using zlib.
2424 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2425 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2426 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2427 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2428 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2429 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2431 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2432 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2434 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2435 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2436 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2437 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2439 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2440 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2441 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2442 @option{--help} option.
2444 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2445 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2446 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2447 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2448 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2449 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2451 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2452 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2453 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2456 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2457 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2460 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2462 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2463 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2464 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2465 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2466 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2467 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2468 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2469 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2470 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2471 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2472 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2474 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2475 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2476 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2477 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2478 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2479 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2481 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2482 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2487 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2489 @c man begin OPTIONS
2491 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2492 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2493 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2494 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2495 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2496 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2497 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2500 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2501 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2502 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2503 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2507 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2508 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2509 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2510 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2511 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2514 @item --base-file @var{file}
2515 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2516 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2518 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2522 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2523 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2527 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2528 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2529 @item --enable-long-section-names
2530 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2531 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2532 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2533 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2534 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2535 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2536 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2537 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2538 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2539 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2540 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2541 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2542 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2543 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2544 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2545 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2546 image and not stripping symbols.
2547 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2549 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2550 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2551 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2554 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2555 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2556 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2557 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2558 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2559 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2560 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2561 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2562 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2563 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2564 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2565 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2566 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568 @kindex --leading-underscore
2569 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2570 @item --leading-underscore
2571 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2572 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2573 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2574 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2576 @cindex DLLs, creating
2577 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2578 @item --export-all-symbols
2579 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2580 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2581 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2582 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2583 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2584 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2585 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2586 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2587 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2588 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2589 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2590 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2591 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2592 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2593 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2594 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2595 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2596 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2597 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2598 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2599 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2600 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2601 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2603 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2604 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2605 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2606 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2610 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2611 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2612 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2614 @kindex --file-alignment
2615 @item --file-alignment
2616 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2617 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2623 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2624 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2625 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2626 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2628 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631 @kindex --image-base
2632 @item --image-base @var{value}
2633 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2634 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2635 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2636 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2637 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2643 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2644 symbols before they are exported.
2645 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2647 @kindex --large-address-aware
2648 @item --large-address-aware
2649 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2650 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2651 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2652 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2653 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2654 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2656 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2657 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2658 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2659 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2660 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2661 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2662 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2664 @kindex --major-image-version
2665 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2666 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2667 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2669 @kindex --major-os-version
2670 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2671 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2675 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2676 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2677 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679 @kindex --minor-image-version
2680 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2681 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2682 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684 @kindex --minor-os-version
2685 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2686 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2687 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2689 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2690 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2691 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2694 @cindex DEF files, creating
2695 @cindex DLLs, creating
2696 @kindex --output-def
2697 @item --output-def @var{file}
2698 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2699 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2700 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2701 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2702 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2705 @cindex DLLs, creating
2706 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2707 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2708 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2709 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2710 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2711 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2712 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2713 execution are avoided.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2716 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2717 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2718 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2719 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2723 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2724 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2725 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2726 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2727 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2728 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2729 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2730 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2731 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2734 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2735 @item --enable-auto-import
2736 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2737 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2738 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2739 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2740 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2741 specification published by Microsoft.
2743 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2744 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2745 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2746 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2747 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2749 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2752 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2753 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2755 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2756 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2757 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2758 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2759 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2760 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2761 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2762 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2763 the warning, and exit.
2765 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2766 data type of the exported variable:
2768 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2769 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2770 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2772 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2773 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2774 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2775 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2778 extern type extern_array[];
2780 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2786 extern type extern_array[];
2788 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2791 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2792 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2795 extern struct s extern_struct;
2796 extern_struct.field -->
2797 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2803 extern long long extern_ll;
2805 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2808 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2809 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2810 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2811 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2812 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2813 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2814 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2815 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2823 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2824 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2834 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2835 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2836 volatile int *parr = arr;
2837 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2844 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2845 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2846 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2847 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2851 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2854 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2855 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2859 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2860 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2861 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2863 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2865 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2866 @item --disable-auto-import
2867 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2868 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2869 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2871 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2872 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2873 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2874 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2875 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2876 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2877 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2879 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2881 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2883 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2885 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2886 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2887 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2888 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2890 @kindex --section-alignment
2891 @item --section-alignment
2892 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2893 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2894 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2898 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2899 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2900 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2901 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2903 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2906 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2907 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2908 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2909 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2910 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2911 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2912 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2914 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2916 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2917 of the PE file header:
2918 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2920 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2921 @item --high-entropy-va
2922 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2925 @kindex --dynamicbase
2927 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2928 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2929 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2931 @kindex --forceinteg
2933 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2937 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2938 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2940 @kindex --no-isolation
2941 @item --no-isolation
2942 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2946 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2951 Do not bind this image.
2955 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2959 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2961 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2962 @item --insert-timestamp
2963 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2964 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2965 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2966 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2967 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2968 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2969 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2970 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2977 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2979 @c man begin OPTIONS
2981 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2982 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2983 all executables use an index of 0.
2988 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2989 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2990 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2993 @kindex --dsbt-index
2994 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2995 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2996 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2997 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2998 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3000 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3001 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3002 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3010 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3012 @c man begin OPTIONS
3014 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3015 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3019 @kindex --no-trampoline
3020 @item --no-trampoline
3021 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3022 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3023 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3025 @kindex --bank-window
3026 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3027 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3028 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3029 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3030 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3038 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3040 @c man begin OPTIONS
3042 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3043 when linking for 68K targets.
3048 @item --got=@var{type}
3049 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3050 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3051 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3052 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3060 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3062 @c man begin OPTIONS
3064 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3065 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3066 linking for MIPS targets.
3074 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3075 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3076 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3077 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3078 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3081 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3082 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3083 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3084 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3085 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3086 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3087 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3088 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3089 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3090 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3091 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3092 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3102 @section Environment Variables
3104 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3106 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3107 @ifclear SingleFormat
3110 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3112 @ifclear SingleFormat
3114 @cindex default input format
3115 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3116 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3117 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3118 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3119 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3120 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3121 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3122 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3123 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3124 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3125 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3129 @cindex default emulation
3130 @cindex emulation, default
3131 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3132 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3133 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3134 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3135 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3136 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3137 linker was configured.
3139 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3140 @cindex demangling, default
3141 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3142 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3143 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3144 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3145 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3152 @chapter Linker Scripts
3155 @cindex linker scripts
3156 @cindex command files
3157 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3158 written in the linker command language.
3160 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3161 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3162 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3163 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3164 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3167 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3168 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3169 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3170 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3171 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3173 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3174 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3175 default linker script.
3177 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3178 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3182 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3183 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3184 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3185 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3186 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3187 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3188 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3189 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3190 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3191 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3192 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3195 @node Basic Script Concepts
3196 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3197 @cindex linker script concepts
3198 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3199 describe the linker script language.
3201 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3202 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3203 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3204 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3205 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3206 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3207 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3208 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3210 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3211 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3212 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3213 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3214 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3215 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3216 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3217 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3218 of debugging information.
3220 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3221 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3222 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3223 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3224 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3225 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3226 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3227 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3228 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3229 RAM address would be the VMA.
3231 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3232 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3234 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3235 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3236 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3237 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3238 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3239 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3240 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3242 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3243 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3247 @section Linker Script Format
3248 @cindex linker script format
3249 Linker scripts are text files.
3251 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3252 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3253 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3256 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3257 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3258 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3259 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3262 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3263 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3266 @node Simple Example
3267 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3268 @cindex linker script example
3269 @cindex example of linker script
3270 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3272 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3273 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3274 memory layout of the output file.
3276 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3277 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3278 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3279 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3280 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3283 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3284 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3285 linker script which will do that:
3290 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3292 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3293 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3297 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3298 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3299 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3301 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3302 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3303 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3304 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3305 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3306 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3307 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3309 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3310 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3311 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3312 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3313 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3314 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3316 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3317 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3318 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3320 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3321 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3322 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3323 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3324 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3325 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3326 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3328 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3329 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3330 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3331 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3332 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3335 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3337 @node Simple Commands
3338 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3339 @cindex linker script simple commands
3340 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3343 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3344 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3345 @ifclear SingleFormat
3346 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3349 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3350 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3354 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3355 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3356 @cindex start of execution
3357 @cindex first instruction
3359 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3360 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3361 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3366 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3367 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3368 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3371 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3373 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3375 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3376 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3377 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3379 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3381 The address @code{0}.
3385 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3386 @cindex linker script file commands
3387 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3390 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3391 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3392 @cindex including a linker script
3393 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3394 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3395 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3398 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3399 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3401 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3402 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3403 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3404 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3405 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3406 @cindex linker script input object files
3407 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3408 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3410 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3411 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3412 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3414 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3415 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3417 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3418 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3419 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3420 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3421 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3422 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3423 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3424 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3425 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3426 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3428 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3429 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3432 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3433 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3434 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3436 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3437 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3438 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3439 @cindex grouping input files
3440 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3441 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3442 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3443 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3445 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3446 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3447 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3448 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3449 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3450 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3451 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3452 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3453 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3454 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3457 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3458 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3459 @cindex output file name in linker script
3460 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3461 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3462 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3463 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3466 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3467 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3469 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3470 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3471 @cindex library search path in linker script
3472 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3473 @cindex search path in linker script
3474 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3475 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3476 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3477 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3478 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3479 the command line option are searched first.
3481 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3482 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3483 @cindex first input file
3484 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3485 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3486 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3487 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3491 @ifclear SingleFormat
3492 @node Format Commands
3493 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3494 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3497 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3498 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3499 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500 @cindex output file format in linker script
3501 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3502 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3503 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3504 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3505 line option takes precedence.
3507 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3508 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3509 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3512 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3513 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3514 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3515 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3517 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3520 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3522 This says that the default format for the output file is
3523 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3524 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3527 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3528 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3529 @cindex input file format in linker script
3530 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3531 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3532 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3533 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3534 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3535 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3540 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3541 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3542 @cindex region alias
3543 @cindex region names
3545 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3546 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3549 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3552 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3553 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3554 to memory regions. An example follows.
3556 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3557 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3558 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3559 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3560 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3561 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3566 @code{.text} program code;
3568 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3570 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3572 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3575 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3576 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3577 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3578 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3580 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3581 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3582 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3583 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3584 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3585 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3587 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3588 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3589 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3590 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3592 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3593 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3596 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3609 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3614 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3615 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3623 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3624 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3625 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3628 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3632 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3635 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3636 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3637 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3638 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3641 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3642 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3643 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3647 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3648 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3651 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3652 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3653 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3654 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3657 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3658 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3659 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3660 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3664 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3665 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3669 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3670 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3676 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3677 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3682 extern char data_start [];
3683 extern char data_size [];
3684 extern char data_load_start [];
3686 void copy_data(void)
3688 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3690 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3695 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3696 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3697 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3700 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3702 @cindex assertion in linker script
3703 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3704 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3706 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3707 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3708 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3709 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3710 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3715 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3716 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3717 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3721 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3722 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3723 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3726 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3729 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3730 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3736 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3738 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3739 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3740 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3741 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3742 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3743 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3745 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3746 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3747 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3748 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3749 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3750 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3752 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3753 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3754 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3755 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3756 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3757 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3759 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3760 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3761 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3762 @cindex section groups
3764 This command has the same effect as the
3765 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3766 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3767 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3768 specified (@samp{-r}).
3770 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3772 @cindex insert user script into default script
3773 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3774 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3775 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3776 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3777 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3778 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3779 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3780 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3781 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3782 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3783 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3784 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3785 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3792 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3793 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3799 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3800 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3801 @cindex cross references
3802 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3803 references among certain output sections.
3805 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3806 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3807 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3808 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3809 a function defined in the other section.
3811 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3812 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3813 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3814 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3817 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3818 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3819 @cindex cross references
3820 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3821 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3823 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3824 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3825 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3826 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3827 must never call back.
3829 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3830 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3831 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3832 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3833 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3834 names, not input section names.
3836 @ifclear SingleFormat
3837 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3838 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3839 @cindex machine architecture
3840 @cindex architecture
3841 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3842 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3843 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3844 the @samp{-f} option.
3847 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3848 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3849 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3850 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3851 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3852 @xref{Expression Section}.
3856 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3857 @cindex assignment in scripts
3858 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3859 @cindex variables, defining
3860 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3861 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3864 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3867 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3868 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3871 @node Simple Assignments
3872 @subsection Simple Assignments
3874 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3877 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3878 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3879 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3880 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3881 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3882 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3883 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3884 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3885 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3888 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3889 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3890 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3892 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3893 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3895 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3897 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3899 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3900 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3901 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3903 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3904 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3906 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3907 assignments may be used:
3918 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3919 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3923 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3924 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3925 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3926 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3927 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3932 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3933 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3935 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3939 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3947 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3948 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3952 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3957 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3958 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3959 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3960 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3961 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3962 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3963 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3964 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3966 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3979 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3980 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3981 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3982 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3983 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3984 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3986 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3987 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3988 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3989 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3990 hidden and won't be exported.
3992 @node Source Code Reference
3993 @subsection Source Code Reference
3995 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3996 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3997 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3998 symbol that does not have a value.
4000 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4001 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4002 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4003 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4004 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4005 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4006 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4007 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4013 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4019 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4020 transformation has taken place.
4022 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4023 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4024 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4025 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4026 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4027 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4028 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4034 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4035 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4036 number 1000 is initially stored.
4038 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4039 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4040 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4047 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4048 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4055 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4056 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4057 the variable @samp{a}.
4059 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4060 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4061 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4067 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4068 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4069 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4070 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4071 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4073 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4074 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4075 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4076 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4077 linker script contains these declarations:
4081 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4082 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4083 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4087 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4091 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4093 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4097 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4098 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4099 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4103 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4105 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4109 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4113 @section SECTIONS Command
4115 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4116 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4118 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4122 @var{sections-command}
4123 @var{sections-command}
4128 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4132 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4134 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4136 an output section description
4138 an overlay description
4141 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4142 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4143 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4144 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4145 the layout of the output file.
4147 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4150 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4151 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4152 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4153 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4154 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4155 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4158 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4159 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4160 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4161 * Input Section:: Input section description
4162 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4163 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4164 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4165 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4166 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4169 @node Output Section Description
4170 @subsection Output Section Description
4171 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4174 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4176 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4177 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4180 @var{output-section-command}
4181 @var{output-section-command}
4183 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4187 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4189 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4190 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4191 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4192 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4193 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4195 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4199 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4201 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4203 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4205 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4208 @node Output Section Name
4209 @subsection Output Section Name
4210 @cindex name, section
4211 @cindex section name
4212 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4213 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4214 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4215 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4216 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4217 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4218 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4219 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4220 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4221 commas must be quoted.
4223 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4226 @node Output Section Address
4227 @subsection Output Section Address
4228 @cindex address, section
4229 @cindex section address
4230 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4231 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4232 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4234 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4235 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4236 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4237 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4238 contained within the output section.
4240 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4244 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4245 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4249 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4250 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4251 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4252 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4255 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4256 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4264 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4271 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4275 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4276 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4277 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4278 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4281 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4282 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4283 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4284 do something like this:
4286 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4289 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4290 aligned upward to the specified value.
4292 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4293 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4294 sections are ignored).
4297 @subsection Input Section Description
4298 @cindex input sections
4299 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4300 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4302 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4303 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4304 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4305 map the input files into your memory layout.
4308 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4309 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4310 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4311 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4312 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4315 @node Input Section Basics
4316 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4317 @cindex input section basics
4318 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4319 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4321 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4322 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4324 The most common input section description is to include all input
4325 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4326 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4331 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4332 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4333 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4334 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4337 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4340 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4341 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4342 placed inside the section list, for example:
4344 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4347 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4348 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4349 more than one section, as described below.
4351 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4357 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4358 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4359 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4360 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4361 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4362 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4364 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4365 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4366 immediately following section, for example:
4368 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4371 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4372 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4373 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4374 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4375 could be modified to:
4377 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4380 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4381 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4382 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4384 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4387 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4388 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4389 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4394 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4395 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4397 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4402 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4403 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4408 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4409 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4410 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4411 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4412 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4414 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4415 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4416 with no whitespace around the colon.
4420 matches file within archive
4422 matches the whole archive
4424 matches file but not one in an archive
4427 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4428 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4429 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4430 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4431 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4432 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4433 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4434 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4437 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4438 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4439 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4444 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4445 and does not contain any wild card
4446 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4447 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4448 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4449 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4450 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4451 the archive search path.
4453 @node Input Section Wildcards
4454 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4455 @cindex input section wildcards
4456 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4457 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4458 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4459 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4460 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4462 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4463 pattern for the file name.
4465 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4469 matches any number of characters
4471 matches any single character
4473 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4474 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4475 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4477 quotes the following character
4480 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4481 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4482 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4483 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4484 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4485 a @samp{/} character.
4487 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4488 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4489 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4491 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4492 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4493 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4494 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4495 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4497 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4498 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4501 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4502 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4503 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4504 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4505 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4506 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4507 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4509 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4510 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4511 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4512 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4513 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4514 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4516 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4517 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4518 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4519 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4520 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4523 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4525 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4526 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4530 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4531 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4532 sections have the same name.
4534 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4535 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4536 sections have the same alignment.
4538 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4539 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4541 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4542 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4544 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4547 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4548 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4549 takes precedence over the command line option.
4551 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4552 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4553 treated as nested sorting command.
4557 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4558 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4559 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4561 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4562 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4563 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4566 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4567 command line option will be ignored.
4570 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4571 section sorting option.
4573 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4574 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4575 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4577 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4578 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4579 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4580 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4581 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4582 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4586 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4587 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4588 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4589 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4594 @node Input Section Common
4595 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4596 @cindex common symbol placement
4597 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4598 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4599 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4600 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4601 named @samp{COMMON}.
4603 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4604 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4605 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4606 input files are placed in another section.
4608 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4609 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4611 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4614 @cindex scommon section
4615 @cindex small common symbols
4616 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4617 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4618 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4619 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4620 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4621 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4622 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4626 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4627 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4630 @node Input Section Keep
4631 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4633 @cindex garbage collection
4634 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4635 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4636 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4637 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4638 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4640 @node Input Section Example
4641 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4642 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4643 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4644 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4645 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4646 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4647 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4648 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4649 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4650 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4678 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4679 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4680 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4681 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4682 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4683 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4684 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4686 @node Output Section Data
4687 @subsection Output Section Data
4689 @cindex section data
4690 @cindex output section data
4691 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4692 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4693 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4694 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4695 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4696 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4697 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4698 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4699 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4700 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4703 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4704 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4705 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4708 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4709 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4715 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4716 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4717 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4718 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4719 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4721 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4722 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4723 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4724 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4725 endianness of the first input object file.
4727 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4728 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4730 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4732 whereas this will work:
4734 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4737 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4738 @cindex holes, filling
4739 @cindex unspecified memory
4740 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4741 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4742 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4743 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4744 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4745 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4746 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4747 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4748 different parts of an output section.
4750 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4756 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4757 section attribute, but it only affects the
4758 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4759 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4760 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4763 @node Output Section Keywords
4764 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4765 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4769 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4770 @cindex input filename symbols
4771 @cindex filename symbols
4772 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4773 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4774 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4775 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4776 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4778 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4779 normally used for any other object file format.
4781 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4782 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4783 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4785 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4786 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4787 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4788 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4789 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4790 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4791 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4792 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4793 ignored for other object file formats.
4795 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4796 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4797 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4798 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4799 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4800 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4801 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4802 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4803 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4804 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4805 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4808 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4809 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4810 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4811 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4812 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4813 runtime code expects to see.
4817 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4822 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4828 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4829 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4830 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4831 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4832 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4833 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4834 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4837 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4838 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4839 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4844 @node Output Section Discarding
4845 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4846 @cindex discarding sections
4847 @cindex sections, discarding
4848 @cindex removing sections
4849 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4850 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4851 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4853 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4856 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4857 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4858 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4859 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4860 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4861 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4862 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4863 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4864 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4866 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4867 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4868 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4869 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4870 section is discarded.
4873 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4874 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4875 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4877 @node Output Section Attributes
4878 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4879 @cindex output section attributes
4880 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4885 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4887 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4888 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4891 @var{output-section-command}
4892 @var{output-section-command}
4894 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4898 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4899 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4900 remaining section attributes.
4903 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4904 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4905 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4906 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4907 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4908 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4909 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4910 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4913 @node Output Section Type
4914 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4915 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4916 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4920 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4921 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4926 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4927 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4928 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4929 section when the program is run.
4933 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4934 @cindex loading, preventing
4935 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4936 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4937 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4938 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4939 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4943 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4949 @node Output Section LMA
4950 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4951 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4952 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4953 @cindex load address
4954 @cindex section load address
4955 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4956 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4957 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4958 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4959 address is optional.
4961 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4962 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4963 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4964 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4965 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4967 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4968 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4973 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4974 the LMA address as well.
4977 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4980 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4981 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4982 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4983 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4984 the last section in the located region.
4987 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4988 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4991 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4992 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4995 @cindex ROM initialized data
4996 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4997 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4998 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4999 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5000 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5001 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5002 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5003 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5004 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5010 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5012 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5013 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5015 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5020 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5021 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5022 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5023 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5028 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5029 char *src = &_etext;
5032 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5033 while (dst < &_edata)
5037 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5042 @node Forced Output Alignment
5043 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5044 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5045 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5046 @cindex output section alignment
5047 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5048 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5049 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5051 @node Forced Input Alignment
5052 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5053 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5054 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5055 @cindex input section alignment
5056 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5057 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5058 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5060 @node Output Section Constraint
5061 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5064 @cindex constraints on output sections
5065 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5066 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5067 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5068 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5070 @node Output Section Region
5071 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5072 @kindex >@var{region}
5073 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5074 @cindex memory regions and sections
5075 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5076 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5078 Here is a simple example:
5081 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5082 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5086 @node Output Section Phdr
5087 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5089 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5090 @cindex program headers and sections
5091 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5092 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5093 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5094 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5095 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5096 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5098 Here is a simple example:
5101 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5102 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5106 @node Output Section Fill
5107 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5108 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5109 @cindex section fill pattern
5110 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5111 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5112 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5113 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5114 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5115 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5116 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5117 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5118 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5119 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5120 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5121 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5122 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5124 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5125 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5127 Here is a simple example:
5130 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5134 @node Overlay Description
5135 @subsection Overlay Description
5138 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5139 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5140 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5141 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5142 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5143 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5146 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5147 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5148 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5149 command is as follows:
5152 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5156 @var{output-section-command}
5157 @var{output-section-command}
5159 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5162 @var{output-section-command}
5163 @var{output-section-command}
5165 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5167 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5171 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5172 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5173 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5174 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5175 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5176 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5178 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5179 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5181 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5182 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5183 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5184 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5185 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5186 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5188 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5189 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5190 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5191 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5192 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5194 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5195 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5196 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5197 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5198 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5199 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5200 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5202 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5203 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5205 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5206 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5209 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5211 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5212 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5217 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5218 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5219 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5220 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5221 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5222 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5224 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5229 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5230 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5231 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5235 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5236 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5237 example could have been written identically as follows.
5241 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5242 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5243 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5244 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5245 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5246 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5247 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5252 @section MEMORY Command
5254 @cindex memory regions
5255 @cindex regions of memory
5256 @cindex allocating memory
5257 @cindex discontinuous memory
5258 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5259 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5261 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5262 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5263 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5264 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5265 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5266 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5267 around to fit into the available regions.
5269 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5270 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5271 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5277 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5283 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5284 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5285 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5286 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5287 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5288 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5291 @cindex memory region attributes
5292 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5293 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5294 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5295 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5296 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5297 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5298 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5300 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5315 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5318 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5319 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5320 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5321 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5327 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5328 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5329 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5330 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5336 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5337 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5338 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5339 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5341 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5342 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5343 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5344 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5345 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5346 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5347 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5354 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5355 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5360 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5361 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5362 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5363 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5364 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5365 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5366 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5367 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5368 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5370 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5371 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5372 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5376 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5381 @section PHDRS Command
5383 @cindex program headers
5384 @cindex ELF program headers
5385 @cindex program segments
5386 @cindex segments, ELF
5387 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5388 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5389 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5390 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5392 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5393 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5394 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5395 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5396 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5398 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5399 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5400 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5401 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5402 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5404 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5405 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5406 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5408 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5409 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5415 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5416 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5421 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5422 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5423 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5424 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5425 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5426 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5428 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5429 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5430 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5431 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5432 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5435 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5436 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5437 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5438 contain the section.
5440 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5441 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5442 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5443 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5444 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5445 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5450 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5451 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5452 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5453 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5454 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5455 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5458 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5459 value of the keyword.
5462 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5463 Indicates an unused program header.
5465 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5466 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5469 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5470 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5472 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5473 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5476 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5477 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5479 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5480 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5483 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5484 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5486 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5487 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5489 @item @var{expression}
5490 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5491 be used for types not defined above.
5494 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5495 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5496 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5497 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5498 output section attribute.
5500 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5501 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5502 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5503 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5506 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5507 headers used on a native ELF system.
5513 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5515 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5517 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5523 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5524 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5525 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5527 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5528 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5529 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5536 @section VERSION Command
5537 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5538 @cindex symbol versions
5539 @cindex version script
5540 @cindex versions of symbols
5541 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5542 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5543 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5544 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5547 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5548 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5549 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5551 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5553 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5556 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5557 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5558 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5559 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5560 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5561 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5564 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5590 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5591 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5592 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5593 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5594 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5595 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5596 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5597 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5598 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5599 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5601 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5602 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5603 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5605 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5606 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5607 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5609 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5610 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5611 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5612 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5613 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5614 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5615 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5616 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5617 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5619 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5620 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5621 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5622 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5624 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5625 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5626 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5630 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5633 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5634 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5635 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5636 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5637 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5638 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5639 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5640 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5641 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5642 search for each symbol reference.
5644 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5645 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5646 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5647 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5648 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5649 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5650 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5651 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5652 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5654 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5655 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5656 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5657 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5658 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5660 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5663 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5664 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5665 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5666 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5667 takes precedence over a version script.
5669 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5670 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5671 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5672 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5673 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5675 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5676 source file. Here is an example:
5679 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5680 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5681 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5682 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5685 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5686 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5687 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5688 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5690 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5691 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5692 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5693 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5694 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5695 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5697 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5698 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5699 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5700 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5702 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5705 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5708 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5709 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5710 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5711 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5712 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5714 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5715 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5716 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5717 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5718 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5719 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5720 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5721 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5722 expect when you upgrade.
5725 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5728 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5729 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5730 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5731 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5733 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5735 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5739 * Constants:: Constants
5740 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5741 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5742 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5743 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5744 * Operators:: Operators
5745 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5746 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5747 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5751 @subsection Constants
5752 @cindex integer notation
5753 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5754 All constants are integers.
5756 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5757 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5758 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5759 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5760 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5761 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5763 @cindex scaled integers
5764 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5765 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5766 @cindex suffixes for integers
5767 @cindex integer suffixes
5768 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5772 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5773 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5777 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5779 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5780 respectively. For example, the following
5781 all refer to the same quantity:
5790 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5791 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5793 @node Symbolic Constants
5794 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5795 @cindex symbolic constants
5797 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5798 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5803 The target's maximum page size.
5805 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5806 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5807 The target's default page size.
5813 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5816 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5817 supported by the target.
5820 @subsection Symbol Names
5821 @cindex symbol names
5823 @cindex quoted symbol names
5825 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5826 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5827 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5828 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5829 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5832 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5835 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5836 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5837 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5839 @node Orphan Sections
5840 @subsection Orphan Sections
5842 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5843 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5844 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5845 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5846 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5848 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5849 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5850 placed at the end of that output section.
5852 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5853 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5854 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5855 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5856 one new output section.
5858 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5859 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5860 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5861 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5862 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5863 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5864 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5866 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5867 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5868 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5870 @node Location Counter
5871 @subsection The Location Counter
5874 @cindex location counter
5875 @cindex current output location
5876 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5877 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5878 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5879 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5880 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5883 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5884 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5885 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5886 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5887 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5903 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5904 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5905 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5906 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5907 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5908 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5910 @cindex dot inside sections
5911 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5912 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5913 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5914 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5915 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5916 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5934 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5935 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5936 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5937 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5938 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5939 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5940 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5941 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5943 @cindex dot outside sections
5944 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5945 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5946 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5952 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5956 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5961 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5962 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5963 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5964 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5965 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5966 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5967 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5968 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5969 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5970 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5977 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5981 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5982 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5987 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5988 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5989 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5990 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5991 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5992 section. So you could write:
5998 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6003 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6008 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6009 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6013 @subsection Operators
6014 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6015 @cindex arithmetic operators
6016 @cindex precedence in expressions
6017 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6018 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6021 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6023 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6029 5 left == != > < <= >=
6035 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6039 (1) Prefix operators
6040 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6044 \vskip \baselineskip
6045 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6046 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6049 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6050 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6051 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6052 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6054 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6056 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6057 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6058 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6061 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6064 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6067 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6069 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6074 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6075 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6076 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6079 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6082 @subsection Evaluation
6083 @cindex lazy evaluation
6084 @cindex expression evaluation order
6085 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6086 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6088 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6089 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6090 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6091 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6093 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6094 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6095 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6096 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6098 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6099 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6102 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6103 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6105 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6106 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6112 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6118 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6121 @node Expression Section
6122 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6123 @cindex expression sections
6124 @cindex absolute expressions
6125 @cindex relative expressions
6126 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6127 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6128 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6129 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6130 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6131 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6132 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6133 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6136 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6137 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6138 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6139 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6140 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6141 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6142 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6143 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6144 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6145 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6146 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6147 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6148 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6151 In the following simple example,
6158 __executable_start = 0x100;
6162 __data_start = 0x10;
6170 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6171 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6172 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6173 section in the second two assignments.
6175 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6176 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6180 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6181 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6182 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6184 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6185 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6186 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6188 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6189 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6190 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6191 before applying the operator.
6194 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6198 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6200 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6202 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6203 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6204 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6205 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6206 but an absolute address otherwise.
6208 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6209 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6210 section as the relative operand(s).
6212 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6213 conversions) is an absolute address.
6216 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6217 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6218 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6219 section @samp{.data}:
6223 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6227 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6228 @samp{.data} section.
6230 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6231 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6233 @node Builtin Functions
6234 @subsection Builtin Functions
6235 @cindex functions in expressions
6236 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6237 use in linker script expressions.
6240 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6241 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6242 @cindex expression, absolute
6243 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6244 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6245 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6246 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6248 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6249 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6250 @cindex section address in expression
6251 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6252 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6253 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6254 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6255 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6256 the other two will be absolute:
6262 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6267 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6268 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6274 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6275 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6276 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6277 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6278 @cindex round up location counter
6279 @cindex align location counter
6280 @cindex round up expression
6281 @cindex align expression
6282 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6283 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6284 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6285 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6286 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6287 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6289 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6290 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6291 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6296 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6298 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6304 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6305 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6306 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6307 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6309 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6311 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6312 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6313 @cindex section alignment
6314 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6315 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6316 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6317 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6318 value in that section.
6323 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6330 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6331 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6332 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6333 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6336 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6337 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6338 This is equivalent to either
6340 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6344 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6345 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6348 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6349 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6350 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6351 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6352 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6353 bytes in the on-disk file.
6355 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6356 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6357 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6358 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6359 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6364 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6367 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6368 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6369 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6370 evaluation purposes.
6373 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6376 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6377 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6378 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6379 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6380 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6381 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6382 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6383 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6384 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6385 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6386 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6390 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6393 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6394 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6395 @cindex symbol defaults
6396 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6397 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6398 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6399 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6400 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6401 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6402 existed, its value is preserved:
6408 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6416 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6417 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6418 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6420 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6421 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6422 @cindex section load address in expression
6423 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6426 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6427 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6428 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6429 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6432 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6433 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6436 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6437 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6439 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6440 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6441 @cindex unallocated address, next
6442 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6443 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6444 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6445 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6447 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6448 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6449 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6451 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6452 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6453 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6454 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6455 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6456 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6457 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6458 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6461 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6462 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6463 @cindex section size
6464 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6465 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6466 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6467 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6476 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6477 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6482 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6483 @itemx sizeof_headers
6484 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6486 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6487 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6488 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6489 choose, to facilitate paging.
6491 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6492 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6493 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6494 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6495 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6496 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6497 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6498 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6499 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6500 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6501 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6502 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6505 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6506 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6507 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6508 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6509 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6510 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6511 linker will report an error.
6513 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6515 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6516 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6519 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6520 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6521 read. This can affect archive searching.
6524 @node Machine Dependent
6525 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6527 @cindex machine dependencies
6528 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6529 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6530 functionality are not listed.
6534 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6537 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6540 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6543 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6546 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6549 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6552 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6555 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6558 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6561 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6564 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6567 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6570 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6573 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6576 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6579 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6582 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6585 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6596 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6598 @cindex H8/300 support
6599 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6600 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6603 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6604 @item relaxing address modes
6605 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6606 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6607 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6610 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6611 @item synthesizing instructions
6612 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6613 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6614 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6615 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6616 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6617 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6618 top page of memory).
6620 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6621 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6622 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6623 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6624 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6625 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6626 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6628 @item bit manipulation instructions
6629 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6630 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6631 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6632 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6633 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6634 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6635 the top page of memory).
6637 @item system control instructions
6638 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6639 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6640 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6641 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6642 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6643 the top page of memory).
6653 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6654 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6656 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6658 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6659 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6660 options are required for these chips.
6670 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6672 @cindex i960 support
6674 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6675 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6676 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6677 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6678 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6679 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6680 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6682 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6683 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6684 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6697 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6698 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6700 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6701 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6702 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6703 specifies a library.
6705 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6706 @cindex relaxing on i960
6707 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6708 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6709 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6710 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6711 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6712 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6713 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6714 not itself call any subroutines).
6731 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6732 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6734 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6736 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6738 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6739 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6742 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6743 @item relaxing address modes
6744 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6745 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6746 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6749 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6750 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6751 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6753 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6754 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6755 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6756 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6757 @code{bset} instructions.
6761 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6763 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6764 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6765 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6766 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6767 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6768 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6769 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6770 point to the function trampoline.
6778 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6780 @cindex ARM interworking support
6781 @kindex --support-old-code
6782 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6783 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6784 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6785 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6786 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6787 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6788 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6789 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6790 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6791 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6793 @cindex thumb entry point
6794 @cindex entry point, thumb
6795 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6796 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6797 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6798 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6799 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6800 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6802 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6803 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6804 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6805 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6806 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6807 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6811 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6812 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6813 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6814 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6818 @kindex --target1-rel
6819 @kindex --target1-abs
6820 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6821 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6822 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6823 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6826 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6827 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6828 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6829 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6832 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6834 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6836 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6841 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6842 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6843 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6844 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6846 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6847 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6848 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6850 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6851 relocations are ignored.
6853 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6854 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6855 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6856 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6864 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6865 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6866 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6870 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6871 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6872 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6873 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6874 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6876 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6877 specify it if you are using that target.
6879 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6880 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6881 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6882 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6883 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6884 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6885 the support code can read the intended values.
6887 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6888 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6889 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6890 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6891 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6892 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6894 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6895 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6896 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6897 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6898 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6899 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6901 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6902 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6903 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6904 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6905 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6906 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6907 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6909 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6910 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6911 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6912 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6913 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6914 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6915 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6917 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6918 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6919 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6921 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6922 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6924 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6925 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6926 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6927 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6928 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6929 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6930 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6931 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6933 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6934 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6936 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6937 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6938 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6939 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6940 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6942 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6943 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6944 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6945 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6946 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6947 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6949 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6950 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6952 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6953 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6954 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6957 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6958 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6959 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6960 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6963 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6964 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6965 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6966 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6967 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6968 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6969 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6972 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6973 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6974 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6975 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6976 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6977 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6978 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6981 @kindex --pic-veneer
6982 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6983 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6984 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6985 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6987 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6988 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6989 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6990 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6991 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6992 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6993 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6994 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6995 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6996 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6997 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6998 where they should be placed.
7000 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7001 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7002 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7003 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7004 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7005 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7006 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7007 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7008 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7009 from the input sections.
7011 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7014 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7015 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7018 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7019 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7020 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7021 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7023 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7025 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7026 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7027 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7028 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7030 Please contact ARM for further details.
7032 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7033 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7034 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7035 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7038 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7039 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7040 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7041 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7043 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7044 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7045 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7046 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7048 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7049 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7050 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7051 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7054 @kindex --cmse-implib
7055 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7056 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7057 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7058 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7059 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7061 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7062 @cindex Input import library
7063 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7064 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7065 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7066 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7067 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7068 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7069 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7070 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7084 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7085 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7086 @kindex --multi-subspace
7087 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7088 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7089 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7090 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7091 multiple sub-spaces.
7093 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7094 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7095 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7096 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7097 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7098 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7099 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7100 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7101 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7102 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7103 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7104 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7105 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7106 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7107 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7108 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7110 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7111 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7112 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7113 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7126 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7128 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7129 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7130 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7131 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7132 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7133 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7134 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7135 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7136 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7137 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7139 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7140 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7141 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7142 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7155 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7157 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7160 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7161 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7162 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7163 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7164 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7165 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7167 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7168 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7169 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7170 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7171 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7172 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7173 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7174 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7175 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7176 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7177 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7178 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7191 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7192 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7193 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7194 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7195 can translate between the two formats.
7197 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7198 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7199 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7200 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7201 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7202 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7203 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7204 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7206 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7207 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7208 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7211 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7212 are left out from an mmo file.
7225 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7226 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7227 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7228 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7230 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7231 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7234 @item @samp{.vectors}
7235 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7237 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7238 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7239 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7241 @item @samp{.infomem}
7242 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7243 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7245 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7246 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7247 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7249 @item @samp{.noinit}
7250 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7252 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7266 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7267 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7268 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7269 relaxes objects according to these options.
7272 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7273 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7275 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7276 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7278 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7279 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7281 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7282 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7284 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7285 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7287 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7288 Update the existing EX9 table.
7290 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7291 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7293 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7294 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7296 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7297 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7299 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7300 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7314 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7315 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7316 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7318 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7319 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7320 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7321 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7322 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7323 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7324 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7325 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7326 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7329 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7330 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7331 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7332 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7333 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7334 register as a temporary.
7336 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7337 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7338 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7351 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7352 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7353 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7354 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7355 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7356 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7357 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7358 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7359 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7360 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7361 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7362 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7363 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7365 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7370 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7371 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7372 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7373 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7374 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7375 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7376 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7377 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7379 @kindex --secure-plt
7381 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7382 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7383 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7384 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7390 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7391 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7392 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7393 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7394 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7395 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7396 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7397 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7398 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7399 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7400 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7401 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7403 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7404 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7405 @item --emit-stub-syms
7406 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7407 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7409 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7410 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7411 @item --no-tls-optimize
7412 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7413 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7414 disable the optimization.
7427 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7428 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7430 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7432 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7433 @kindex --stub-group-size
7434 @item --stub-group-size
7435 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7436 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7437 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7438 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7439 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7440 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7441 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7442 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7443 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7444 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7445 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7446 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7447 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7448 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7450 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7451 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7452 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7453 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7455 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7456 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7457 @item --emit-stub-syms
7458 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7459 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7461 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7463 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7466 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7467 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7468 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7469 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7470 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7471 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7472 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7473 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7476 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7477 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7478 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7479 @item --save-restore-funcs
7480 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7481 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7482 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7483 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7484 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7487 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7488 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7489 @item --no-tls-optimize
7490 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7491 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7492 disable the optimization.
7494 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7495 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7496 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7497 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7498 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7499 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7500 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7501 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7502 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7503 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7504 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7505 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7506 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7507 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7508 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7510 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7511 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7512 @item --no-opd-optimize
7513 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7514 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7515 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7516 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7518 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7519 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7520 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7521 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7522 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7523 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7524 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7526 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7527 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7528 @item --no-toc-optimize
7529 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7530 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7531 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7532 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7533 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7534 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7535 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7536 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7537 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7538 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7539 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7542 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7543 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7544 @item --no-multi-toc
7545 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7546 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7548 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7549 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7550 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7551 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7552 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7553 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7554 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7555 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7557 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7558 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7560 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7561 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7562 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7563 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7564 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7565 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7566 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7569 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7571 @kindex --no-plt-align
7573 @itemx --no-plt-align
7574 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7575 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7576 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7577 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7578 stubs are packed tightly.
7580 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7581 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7582 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7583 @item --plt-static-chain
7584 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7585 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7586 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7587 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7589 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7590 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7591 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7592 @item --plt-thread-safe
7593 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7594 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7595 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7596 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7597 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7598 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7599 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7600 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7601 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7616 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7618 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7622 @kindex --s390-pgste
7624 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7625 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7626 binaries marked that way.
7640 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7642 @cindex SPU ELF options
7648 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7650 @cindex SPU overlays
7651 @kindex --no-overlays
7653 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7654 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7655 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7656 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7658 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7659 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7660 @item --emit-stub-syms
7661 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7662 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7664 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7665 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7666 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7667 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7668 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7669 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7671 @cindex SPU local store size
7672 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7673 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7674 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7675 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7676 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7679 @kindex --stack-analysis
7680 @item --stack-analysis
7681 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7682 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7683 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7684 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7685 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7686 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7687 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7688 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7689 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7690 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7691 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7692 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7693 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7694 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7695 and calls will be given.
7698 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7699 @item --emit-stack-syms
7700 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7701 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7702 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7703 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7704 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7705 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7706 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7707 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7721 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7722 @cindex TI COFF versions
7723 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7724 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7725 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7726 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7727 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7728 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7741 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7743 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7744 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7745 command line options mentioned here.
7748 @cindex import libraries
7749 @item import libraries
7750 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7751 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7752 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7753 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7754 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7755 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7757 @item exporting DLL symbols
7758 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7759 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7762 @item using auto-export functionality
7763 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7764 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7765 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7768 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7769 @item --exclude-symbols
7770 @item --exclude-libs
7771 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7772 @item --version-script
7775 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7776 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7777 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7778 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7779 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7780 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7781 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7782 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7784 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7785 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7786 if either of the following are true:
7789 @item A DEF file is used.
7790 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7793 @item using a DEF file
7794 @cindex using a DEF file
7795 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7796 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7797 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7798 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7799 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7802 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7805 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7806 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7808 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7811 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7817 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7823 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7824 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7825 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7826 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7827 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7828 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7829 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7830 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7831 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7833 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7834 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7835 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7837 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7838 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7839 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7840 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7842 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7843 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7844 non-default base address for the image.
7846 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7847 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7848 filename specified on the command line.
7850 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7854 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7855 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7856 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7859 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7860 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7861 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7862 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7863 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7864 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7865 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7867 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7869 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7870 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7871 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7872 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7873 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7875 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7876 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7877 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7880 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7881 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7882 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7883 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7884 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7885 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7886 application will behave unexpectedly.
7888 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7889 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7890 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7891 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7892 the DLL without an import library.
7894 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7895 other DEF file statements
7897 @cindex creating a DEF file
7898 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7899 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7901 @item Using decorations
7902 @cindex Using decorations
7903 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7904 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7908 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7909 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7912 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7913 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7914 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7915 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7917 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7918 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7922 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7923 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7926 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7927 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7928 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7929 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7930 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7931 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7932 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7936 @cindex automatic data imports
7937 @item automatic data imports
7938 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7939 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7940 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7941 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7942 code to these platforms, especially for large
7943 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7944 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7945 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7946 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7947 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7948 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7949 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7950 trigger the feature's use.
7952 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7953 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7955 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7956 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7958 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7959 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7960 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7963 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7964 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7965 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7966 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7967 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7968 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7969 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7970 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7973 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7974 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7975 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7976 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7977 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7978 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7979 run without error on an older system.
7981 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7984 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7985 @item direct linking to a dll
7986 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7987 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7988 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7989 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7990 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7991 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7992 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7993 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7994 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7995 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7997 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7998 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7999 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8000 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8001 select the dll instead of an import library.
8004 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8005 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8017 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8019 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8020 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8021 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8022 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8025 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8026 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8027 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8028 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8029 could coexist on the same machine.
8031 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8032 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8033 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8039 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8040 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8043 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8046 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8048 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8051 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8052 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8053 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8054 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8056 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8057 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8058 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8062 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8065 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8068 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8071 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8078 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8081 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8082 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8083 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8085 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8086 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8088 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8089 work with auto-imported data.
8091 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8092 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8093 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8094 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8095 possible to do this without an import lib.
8097 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8098 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8099 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8100 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8102 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8103 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8104 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8105 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8106 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8107 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8108 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8110 @item symbol aliasing
8112 @item adding additional names
8113 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8114 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8115 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8116 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8117 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8120 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8127 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8129 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8130 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8133 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8134 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8137 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8140 @item renaming symbols
8141 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8142 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8143 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8144 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8145 created). In the following example:
8148 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8154 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8158 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8159 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8160 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8161 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8162 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8163 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8164 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8165 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8166 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8167 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8168 which is probably not what you wanted.
8170 @cindex weak externals
8171 @item weak externals
8172 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8173 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8174 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8175 are three variants of weak externals:
8177 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8178 called lazy externals.
8179 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8180 This form is not presently implemented.
8181 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8184 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8185 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8186 uses a default value.
8188 @cindex aligned common symbols
8189 @item aligned common symbols
8190 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8191 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8192 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8193 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8194 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8195 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8196 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8197 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8212 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8214 @cindex Xtensa processors
8215 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8216 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8217 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8218 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8219 example, with the command:
8231 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8232 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8233 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8234 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8235 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8236 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8237 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8239 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8240 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8241 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8242 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8243 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8244 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8245 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8246 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8247 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8248 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8249 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8250 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8252 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8253 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8254 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8255 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8256 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8257 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8258 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8259 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8260 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8261 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8262 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8263 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8264 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8265 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8267 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8270 @cindex Xtensa options
8273 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8274 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8275 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8276 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8277 preserve the correctness of the code.
8285 @ifclear SingleFormat
8290 @cindex object file management
8291 @cindex object formats available
8293 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8294 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8295 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8296 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8297 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8298 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8299 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8300 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8301 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8303 @cindex BFD requirements
8304 @cindex requirements for BFD
8305 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8306 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8307 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8308 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8309 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8310 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8311 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8313 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8314 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8315 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8316 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8319 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8323 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8324 @cindex opening object files
8325 @include bfdsumm.texi
8328 @node Reporting Bugs
8329 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8330 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8331 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8333 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8335 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8336 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8337 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8338 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8341 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8342 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8345 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8346 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8350 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8351 @cindex bug criteria
8353 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8356 @cindex fatal signal
8357 @cindex linker crash
8358 @cindex crash of linker
8360 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8361 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8363 @cindex error on valid input
8365 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8367 @cindex invalid input
8369 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8370 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8371 object files are correct.
8374 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8375 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8379 @section How to Report Bugs
8381 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8383 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8384 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8385 recommend you contact that organization first.
8387 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8388 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8392 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8396 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8397 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8398 fact or leave it out, state it!
8400 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8401 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8402 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8403 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8404 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8405 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8406 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8407 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8408 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8409 and the most helpful.
8411 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8412 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8413 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8415 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8416 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8417 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8418 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8420 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8424 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8425 the @samp{--version} argument.
8427 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8428 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8431 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8432 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8435 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8439 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8443 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8444 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8445 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8448 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8449 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8452 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8453 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8454 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8455 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8456 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8457 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8458 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8459 attachments are best.
8461 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8462 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8463 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8464 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8465 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8468 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8469 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8471 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8472 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8473 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8474 a chance to make a mistake.
8476 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8477 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8478 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8479 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8480 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8481 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8482 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8483 any conclusion from our observations.
8486 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8487 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8488 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8489 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8490 context, not by line number.
8492 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8493 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8496 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8500 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8502 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8503 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8504 changes will not affect it.
8506 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8507 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8508 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8509 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8511 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8512 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8513 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8514 less time, and so on.
8516 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8517 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8520 A patch for the bug.
8522 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8523 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8524 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8525 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8527 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8528 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8529 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8530 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8533 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8534 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8535 help us to understand.
8538 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8540 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8541 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8545 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8546 @cindex MRI compatibility
8547 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8548 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8549 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8550 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8551 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8552 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8553 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8555 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8556 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8557 features to make use of them.
8559 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8560 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8562 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8563 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8564 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8565 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8566 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8568 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8570 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8571 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8572 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8575 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8576 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8577 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8578 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8579 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8580 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8581 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8582 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8583 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8584 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8585 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8587 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8588 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8589 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8590 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8592 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8594 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8595 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8596 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8597 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8599 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8600 @item BASE @var{expression}
8601 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8602 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8604 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8605 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8606 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8607 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8609 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8611 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8613 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8614 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8615 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8616 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8620 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8623 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8626 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8630 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8631 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8632 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8633 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8635 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8636 same line, with no change in its effect.
8638 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8639 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8640 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8641 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8642 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8645 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8646 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8647 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8648 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8649 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8651 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8652 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8653 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8654 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8655 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8656 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8657 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8658 file, in the order specified.
8660 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8661 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8662 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8663 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8664 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8665 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8667 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8668 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8669 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8670 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8671 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8672 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8673 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8674 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8677 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8678 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8682 @unnumbered LD Index
8687 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8689 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8690 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8691 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8692 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8693 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8694 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8695 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8696 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8698 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.